Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.

2 .

Add more detailed modelling elements. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. Add basic MEP elements. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Germany. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. electrical panels. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. such as duct. electrical. 3 . How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and plumbing engineering workflows. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. fixtures. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. such as mechanical equipment. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. and piping. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises.

you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. When you open a training file. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. When you install the training files as instructed. is located and accessed in the training files location. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. you can choose to save your work. to provide a richer and more finished design. as well as how to open and save them. In this exercise. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. For example. On the Contents tab. Contact your CAD manager for more information. views.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. You do not design entire systems. Create schedules. however. However. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. such as templates and families. and tags. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . and sheets to document the project. when you add ductwork. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. For example. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. templates. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. So. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Metric file names have an _m suffix. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. After completing each exercise. Create detail views. you learn where the training files are located. Metric: files for users working with metric units. your Training folder may be in a different location. NOTE Depending on your installation. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. annotations. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects.

if you open settings. 4 Click the training file name. you are prompted to save the changes.rvt) is selected. double-click Imperial or Metric.rvt. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Accessing Training Files | 5 . enter the new file name. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. 8 If you have made changes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Project Files (*.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. 3 In the right pane. For example. scroll down. For Files of type. click ➤ Save As. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. and click the Training Files icon. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. For File name. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and click Save. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. the Open dialog displays. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. select the folder in which to save the new file. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.rvt and make changes. You may close the file with or without saving changes. and click Open. a list of file types displays. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. and you can open any supported file type.

6 .

2D and 3D view. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the hierarchy of elements. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. quantities. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. drawings. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. As you work in drawing and schedule views. schedules. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. In the Revit MEP model. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the operation of the software is parametric. every drawing sheet. and phases when you need it. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and schedules required for a building project. drawing sheets. scope. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. sections. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. If the length of the elevation is changed. If you move the partition. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the parameter is one of association or connection. In this case. ■ ■ 7 . The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the floor or roof remains connected. In this case.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. You learn the terminology. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and plans. hence. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation.

Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and reference planes are datum elements. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ducts. For example. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. For example. dimensions. and electrical panels. sinks. boilers. For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. When you change something. levels. walls and ceilings are hosts. dimensions. filled regions. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. grids. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. sinks. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. tags. Datum elements help to define project context. They display in relevant views of the design. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. boilers. ducts. They help to describe or document the design. and keynotes are annotation elements.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and 2D detail components. sprinklers. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. sprinklers. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. tags. Examples include detail lines. and electrical panels.

Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. If you can draw. elevation views. top of wall. In other cases. To place levels. floors. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. By using a single project file. For example.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . However. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. programming is not required. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. families. first floor. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. and so forth). the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Most often. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. The project file contains all information for the building design. and drawings of the design. views of the project. and types. you must be in a section or elevation view. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. This information includes components used to design the model. North . such as roofs.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. schedules. from geometry to construction data. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Project: In Revit MEP. In Revit MEP. section views. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. for example. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. or bottom of foundation. and ceilings. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. you can explicitly control them.

■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can also display several project views at one time. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Then experiment with them. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Type: Each family can have several types. pipes. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. System families can be transferred between projects. However. With a few clicks. Unlike system and standard component families. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. or layer the views to see only the one on top. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. identical use. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. such as a A0 title block. and similar graphical representation. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). For example. For example. showing. System families include ducts. A type can also be a style. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. A type can be a specific size of a family. each in-place family contains only a single type. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. and wires.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. hiding. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. For example. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system.

Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. To return the panel to the ribbon.

. data and systems. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. project and system parameters. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and for switching views. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. architect-specific tools. and settings. and CAD files. then select what you want to modify. select the tool first. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for running analysis on the current design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. When working on the Modify tab. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for adding 2D information to a design.

closes the application menu (double-click). By default. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. For example. when adding duct. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. provides requested information.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. displays frequently used tools. provides access to common tools. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. To keep a panel expanded. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects.

select a template and create a new drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select a file to open. such as Export and Publish.. (Save As) export the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Open) save the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Export) On the application menu... click.

. to. annotation. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.. annotation. click.. (Licensing) close the file.On the application menu.. and Walkthrough. provides views including Default 3D. family. Camera. but is not enabled by default. publish the current project. (Print) access product and license information. saves a current project. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. To enable or disable a tool item. or template file. (Publish) print the current drawing. family. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . enters selection mode and ends the current operation. or template file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.

Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. displaying the same information. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. To show the Status Bar again.To undo or redo a series of operations. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. This displays the command history in a list. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Clipboard. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. When you are using a command. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. However. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Starting with the most recent command. or the Family Editor. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. When you are highlighting an element or component. workshared components. check the Status Bar. Modify. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Group. In addition. To hide the Status Bar. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. when you switch to another editing mode. repeat the command. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components.

do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Place a Wall. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. select one or more elements of the same category. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . On the Quick Access toolbar. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. click (Modify). When you place an element in a drawing. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. To change existing elements to a different type.To cancel or exit the current command. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. for example.

click Training Files. For example. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. In the following steps. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. 1 Click ➤ Open.rvt. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. There are several ways to access zoom options. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom the view In the tutorials. After you are familiar with these tasks. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.

The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Modifying the View | 19 . When you release the mouse button. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. In the drawing area. click . SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. on the Navigation bar. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 9 To display SteeringWheels.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 6 Click in the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. the view zooms in on the selected area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. To modify or add snap increments. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 5 Click Zoom To Fit.

12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. As you move the mouse. moving the wheel to the desired location. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 14 To exit the wheel. press ESC. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and then using the Zoom tool again. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and click tin the Options dialog. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the SteeringWheels tab.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. Click and drag to orbit the design. ➤ Options. For more information about SteeringWheels. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.

Performing Common Tasks | 21 . These are the drag controls. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.Design.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. referred to as shape handles. display along the ends. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. bottoms. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. and select the duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. After you are familiar with these tasks. Small blue dots. as shown. called drag controls. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Level 2 . 2 Enter ZR. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Similar controls.HVAC Plan .

click the Undo command. select the first item in the list. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. on the Standard toolbar. 6 On the Undo menu. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Move. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In this example. or press CTRL+Z. All changes you make to a project are tracked. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.

11 With the duct already selected. click to specify the starting position. as shown. such as Move and Copy. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 10 Move the cursor to the right. In this case. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. you want to move the duct. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .Some commands. After selecting the element to move. for example. The duct is moved to the new position. and drag it to the left as shown.

you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.Supply.End a command Some commands. 14 Enter VG. such as the Modify Ducts command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Press ESC twice. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Select Mechanical . 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.Return. Click OK. 13 To end a command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . For example. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

such as coordination review and interference checking. link files. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and open Metric ➤ Templates. use copy/monitor. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. In that case. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 27 . you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. under Create new. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. create and manage views. such as ducts and pipes. You can either select a template from the template library. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. under Template file. 7 In the Project Browser. and geometry from the starting template. settings. You can choose from several templates. New projects inherit all the families.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. and loadable families. Finally. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. and open North. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. click Training files. 6 Click OK. and modify system settings. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. such as the default project units and settings. system families. you learn how to start a project from a template. and click Open.rte template. 5 In the New Project dialog. the default building levels and standard views. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Browse.

for City. under Energy Analysis. 10 Using the same method. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. click Browse. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. ■ For Building Construction. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. click (Browse). zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. select School or University. you can select it now. Click OK. Click Cancel. To maintain office standards and reduce rework.rte template and click Open. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. navigate to Metric Templates. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Location. create another new project using the Construction template. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. When you select the material. In the Choose Template dialog. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects.8 In the drawing area. ■ ■ Under Create new. for Energy Data. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. select Project template. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. select Level 1. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. Click OK twice. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. If you want to use a template other than the default. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Manchester. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . review the construction materials listed. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. For example. (Browse). NH. click Edit.

20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 25 In the left pane. 27 Click OK. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. wiring. 24 In the right pane.rfa and click Open.000 mm. click Sizes. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Round. under Duct Settings. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. click Wiring. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. for 20.00 mm. Holding CTRL.00 mm. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 26 In the right pane.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. plumbing. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. select Views. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. and fire protection systems.00 mm. for 90. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project.00 mm. select Identity Data. 140. For Categories. 33 Click OK. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. After standard settings have been established for an organization. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected.00 mm. and 310. and demand factors for electrical systems. under Duct Settings.00 mm. piping.00 mm. 110. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical.00 mm. click Rectangular. under Pipe Settings. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and 140. 110. 260. Click OK twice. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. power distribution systems. 290. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 23 In the left pane. 22 In the right pane. for 90.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines.00 mm. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.

Select Ascending Click OK twice. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. To enable this coordination. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. under Create new. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. under Template file. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. For Sort by. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. sheets. select Associated Level. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. For Then by. For Then by. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Family and Type. Linking Projects In this exercise. families. select View Name. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 2 In the New Project dialog. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 38 Close the file. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. select Project.rvt.Origin to Origin. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. select Auto . You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. click Training.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. From the Positioning list. In addition. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Click Open. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. and groups that are contained in a project. select Sub-Discipline. 5 Click OK.

select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. select Room Bounding. under Constraints. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. Linking Projects | 31 . 11 In the Type Properties dialog.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active.Mech. 8 If necessary. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. click the level line for 03. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 On the left side of the view. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. click Plan View types.Floor. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK.

31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. indicating that an element has changed. level 3. appears above the copied elements. and the level 4. 29 In the drawing area. warnings notify you of any violations. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. and click to select the linked model. click Custom. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. select Custom. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. indicating that a relationship is established. click By Host View. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. a warning message displays. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. After copying. highlight the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 27 In the drawing area. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. for the link file. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. 34 On the Basics tab. and that the copied elements are monitored. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. Linking Projects | 33 . Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. If you modify a monitored element. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool.

Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . 3 In the View templates dialog. deselect Parking. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. Under Visibility. for the link file. for Name. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 36 Click OK. and Topography. Select Show categories from all disciplines. click Custom. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. under View Properties. enter Mechanical View and click OK. deselect Levels. Roads. click Custom. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Site. select Custom.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. 5 On the Basics tab. 7 Click OK twice. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Planting. click Edit. Under Visibility. Click OK. Click OK. 2 In the New View Template dialog.

Modifying General System Options In this exercise. under View Templates. 9 In the Options dialog. journal cleanup options. select Mechanical and click OK. notification preferences. 8 Click ➤ Options. 3 Under Colors. they are not saved to project files or template files. and your username when using worksharing. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. Notice that the drawing area is black. selection default options. 7 Click OK. click Training Files. Modifying System Settings | 35 . under Template file. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. click the Graphics tab. These settings control the graphics. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.rte. 5 In the New Project dialog. click the Graphics tab. select Invert background color. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Browse. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. 2 In the Options dialog. Modifying System Settings In this exercise.

and click OK. you specify default file locations. the elements causing the error display using this color. and family libraries. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 14 Click OK. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Under Notifications. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 21 Close the file without saving it. select One hour. For Tooltip assistance. 2 In the Options dialog. 11 In the Color dialog. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . However. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red.10 Under Colors. When an error occurs. select None. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 12 Click the General tab. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. click the File Locations tab. select yellow. 18 Select the wall. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. including your default project template. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 19 Press ESC to end the command. family template files. click the value for Selection color. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element.

click Places. Specifying File Locations | 37 . In the following illustration. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. and click Open. click Browse. 8 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. TIP To view a template. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. and you can create new libraries. you can start a new project with that template. under Default path for family template files.3 Under Default template file. Save. Load. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. 4 Click Cancel. centralized. note the list of library names. and Import dialogs. You can modify the existing library names and path. 7 In the Options dialog. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. When you are opening. select the folder to save your files to by default. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. or loading a Revit MEP file. saving. such as in a large. Click and click Browse to select a template. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. 10 In the Places dialog. However. click Browse. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. This path is set automatically during the installation process.

and click Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Save. and Import dialogs. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click OK twice. and select it as the library path. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click My Library. Load. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. ➤ Open. and change the name to My Library. click (Add Value). TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 15 Under Library Name. click the My Library icon. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and click (Browse).11 In the Places dialog. templates. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. or families.

(Remove Value) to delete the library. click Edit. select Ignore words in uppercase. click OK. 11 In the Options dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. 27 Click OK. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . and decal image files. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 20 Click ➤ Options. If you work in a large office. click Places. 14 Click in the drawing area. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. view the current path. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 5 In the text editor. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click the Spelling tab. This path is determined during installation. such as bump maps. 19 Click Cancel. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 3 Under Settings. custom color files. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 23 Click 24 Click OK. If you want to relocate this path. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. specify the new location here. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 21 On the File Locations tab. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 9 In the text editor. 2 In the Options dialog. 22 Select My Library.

click Restore Defaults. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and enter 500 . click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 25 Close the file without saving it. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 18 Click ➤ Options. click OK. 22 In the text editor. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click Browse. 20 Under Settings. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. delete sheetmtl-CU. click Training Files.. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments.rte. You can turn snap settings on and off. 6 In the Snaps dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click the Spelling tab. click File menu ➤ Save. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 21 Under Personal dictionary. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 23 In the text editor. 24 In the Options dialog. you modify snap settings. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Edit. 19 In the Options dialog. you modify snap increments. under Template file. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. In this exercise. click OK. work with snapping turned off. 4 In the New Project dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. under Dimension Snaps. click Close.

12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 8 In the Snaps dialog. deselect Chain. If you do not have a wheel button. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. zoom out until it does so. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. snapping reverts to the system default settings. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. TIP To zoom while sketching. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. and move the cursor to the right. For example. such as ZO to zoom out. use the wheel button on your mouse. This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. enter SM. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 .7 Under Object Snaps. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. If it does not. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. While sketching. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall.

20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and the wall edges.. and delete the value 500 . 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. If you move the cursor along the wall. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 19 Enter SM. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 22 Move the cursor downward.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . the command is only active for one click of the mouse. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. it will snap to the endpoints. and specify the wall endpoint. 25 Click OK. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. the midpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. and move the cursor to the right. Do not set the wall end point. 26 Close the file. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. with or without saving it.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. After applying a color scheme to the zones. In this lesson. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. 45 . NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and then you create a plenum level. After finishing each exercise. you will understand the process. you design a mechanical system for an office building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. However. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. By following the recommended workflow. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. If the tutorial training files are not present.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. water source heat pump (WSHP). go to http://www.autodesk. This system consists of a cooling tower. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. As you create the mechanical system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you first plan the system. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you can choose to save your work. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. In this exercise. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. At the end of the tutorial. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you first configure the linked architectural model. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. methodology. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. duct system and a hydronic piping system. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. In this section. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP .Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). In the left pane of the Open dialog. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. 1 In the Project Browser. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. NOTE When working with a linked file. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click to select it. click Training Files. ceilings. indicating that it’s the active view.MEP. and double-click West . Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. These components are defined in the architectural training file. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Next. roof. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 6 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Constraints. not in the MEP training file. and after the linked model highlights. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.rvt. select Room Bounding. you add a level for plenums. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection.Space Plan is highlighted.

A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and in the Plan View Types dialog. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and click Properties. enter 2600mm. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Draw panel. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. The new level is placed. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4).7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 16 Press Esc. For Offset. Preparing Spaces | 47 . 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. Click Plan View Types. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 2 Plenum. and click OK.

For Sub-Discipline. you place spaces in areas of the building model. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click Level 2 Plenum. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. for Default View Template. for Level. click Edit.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. enter an Offset of 300mm. select Design. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. ■ Click OK twice. Under Identity Data. However. for Top. Under Extents. select MEP . you can choose to save your work. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . For View Classification. 20 In the Project Browser. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. and then place spaces in various types of areas. for View Scale. for View Range.Plenum. select Level Above (Level 3). Notice that the site plan displays in the view. Under View Depth. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. and click Apply Default View Template. For Cut plane. select Plenum Plan. In this exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. In the next exercise.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. In this exercise. enter 0. NOTE After finishing each exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and for Offset.

select Level 2 Plenum. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter 0. For (Tag Location). select Horizontal. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For Offset. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. For Upper Limit.rvt. Placing Spaces | 49 . indicating that it’s the active view. and ceilings). Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. select New. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. walls. For Space.

and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Select the space. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. ensuring coordination between the files. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 14 In the drawing area. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .7 Click to place the space. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. for Number. enter Library. For Name. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. enter 219. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 51 . Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Offset. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. and then click Modify. enter 0. 21 Using the method learned previously. select Level 3. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

and then split the space using a space separation line. 23 Click OK. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a large corridor area. 25 Close the file with or without saving it.22 In the Instance Properties dialog.

for Upper Limit. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and for Offset. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 0. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. select Level 3. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. click Training Files. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.rvt.

and scroll to the newly placed space. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 In the schedule.7 In the Project Browser. In the schedule. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. which was numbered 219Q. click in the name column. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and change the space number to 216A. 10 Click in the number column. and select Corridor. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number.

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 15 Press Esc twice. as shown. 11 Close the schedule view. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.

56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise.16 Using the method learned previously. you place a space in a chase. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.

click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.Space Plan is highlighted. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If necessary. indicating that it’s the active view. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. click Training Files.

58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Upper Limit. 12 Click in the section view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Level 3. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. expand Spaces.4 Press Esc. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Element Properties. enter 0. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. click in the chase area to place the space. For Offset. right-click. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. select Roof Level. and then click OK. for Upper Limit. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. On the Options Bar. 10 In the plan view. 6 Enter VG. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. In the plan view. select the space. select Interior and Reference.

For Number. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume.■ For Limit Offset. the space displays the volume up to the roof only.Space Plan. and maximize the view. enter 1200. 17 Type ZF. under Loaded Tags. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. for Name. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 15 Press Esc. and click OK. Bounding elements (such as walls. Under Identity Data. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. All spaces in the view are tagged. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . ceilings. floors. enter 225PC. enter Chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 .

Zoning is highlighted. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and you placed spaces for various types of areas. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. click Training Files. In the next exercises. it is automatically added to the Default zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone.20 Close the file with or without saving it. 1 In the Project Browser. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In this exercise. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. which removes the space from the Default zone. under Spaces. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and verify that All Disciplines is selected. click Reference. click View ➤ Zones. To display space reference lines. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. After a space is placed in an area.rvt. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

The graphic in the System Browser updates. under Energy Analysis. As you do this. click Training Files. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. select Occupiable. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. indicating that the space is occupiable. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. To display space reference lines. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The Zone tool is active. and a new zone is created. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. the Edit Zone tab displays.Zoning is highlighted. you assign spaces to zones in the building. you assign spaces to a zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. and verify the zones in the System Browser.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). double-click 121 Cafeteria. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. under Spaces. Next. and click OK. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. ) or 5 In the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The new zone is listed in the System Browser. click Reference. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Instruction. Expand HVAC Zones. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. select HVAC Zones. you need to activate the zone visibility. In the System Browser. and modify the zone properties. Instruction 221. Using the Edit Zone tab. 4 In the drawing area. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. you can add or remove a space from the zone. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Click OK. select Computer Lab 222. and Electrical 220 spaces. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. type VG. 5 With the drawing area active. To view the zone in the drawing area. and click Finish Editing Zone. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone).

Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). expand 2 . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 11 Close the System Browser. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 5 Click in the Level 1 . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.Zoning is highlighted. and click OK. You activated zone visibility in the views. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Area B. under Spaces.Zoning. enter 2 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. click Finish Editing Zone. To display space reference lines. for Name. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.West . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. 9 In the System Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. under Identity Data.West . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.rvt. and verify the zone in the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 10 On the Edit Zone tab. click Reference.Zoning view to activate it. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.

7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Verify that the distance is 12mm. 8 In the Level 1 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 15 Press Esc. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active.Zoning floor plan. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Select Attached End. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . zoom out.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view.Zoning view.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. enter Lounge . space. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. click the corner where the Top. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. double-click Level 1 . 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. In this exercise.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. and click OK. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.East. and select 109 Lounge.Zoning to make it the active view.Zoning view. for Name Value. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. on the ViewCube. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. you verify the building. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. Front. double-click the zone tag. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and zone information. verify that Wireframe is selected. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.rvt. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.

The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. select 1_South_Area C. click (Isolate). TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Next. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ ■ On the Details tab. Using the Highlight tool. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you isolate the space. With 109 Lounge selected. ■ Click (Highlight). Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. All spaces in the zone display in isolation.

This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. This indicates the heating set point. cooling air temperature. heating air temperature. Below the list of spaces and zones. Next. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). the zone information displays for the selected zone. and then click OK. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. For People.22 °C : N/A is specified. For Heating Information. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. scroll down in the left pane. and in the People dialog. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. This indicates the cooling set point. click (Shading). This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and click OK. Next. outdoor air per area. and humidification set point. select Lounge/Recreation. For Cooling Information. Below the list of spaces and zones.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. click .22 °C : N/A is specified. verify that 23. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. select 109 Lounge. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. the space information displays for the selected space. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. click .33 °C : 12. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. and dehumidification set point. For Construction Type. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and air changes per hour. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. For Electrical Loads. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and then click OK. verify that 21. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. verify that <Building> is selected. ■ ■ ■ Next.11 °C : 32. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. verify that <Building> is selected.

and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. open MEP . 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. roofs. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. click Cancel. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and other room-bounding components. 12 Using the methods learned previously. enter 0. 15 In the Project Browser. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. floors. select Level 3. For Offset.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.

and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 .Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Click OK. for Number. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). select Plenum. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you verified building. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and zone information. enter 212P. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. select Plenum. Because this is an unoccupied space. For Name. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Under Energy Analysis. and select space Plenum 212P. and verify that the space has replaced the void. In this exercise. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Energy Analysis. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. this option adjusts the times automatically. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. verify that <Building> is specified. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. under Volume Computations. and click OK. For Project Phase. verify that Level 1 is selected. verify that Manchester. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . 8 In the drawing area. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). On the Weather tab. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Location. for City. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that New Construction is selected. you need to select this option. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. For Ground Plane. For Postal Code. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. NH. right-click. If. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.rvt. for Building Service. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. select School or University. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. For Sliver Space Tolerance. is selected.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 03101. and click Element Properties. Click OK twice. click in the Value field. For Export Complexity. select space Library 219. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. click Edit. verify that 300 is specified. and click OK. double-click Level 2 . under Energy Analysis. On the Place tab. click Training Files.Space Plan. For Building Construction. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. for Energy Data. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In order to select a space.

verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. For Location. Under Heat Gain (per Person). 12 Click the Details tab. for Values. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and click to learn the cause for the warning. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. For Building Service. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Click OK. select Specified. You have verified the building information. enter 45 W. verify that School or University is selected. Next. verify that Occupiable is selected. and click OK. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Building Construction. For People.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. For Condition Type. Click OK twice. and then click . Select the space associated with the warning. select Specified. For Sensible. click Edit. for Values. verify that Manchester. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. select Heated and cooled. For Space Type. enter 60 W. click in the Value column. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. a cooling load. select Actual. m. or neither. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. NH. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. select Library . for Values. and enter 15 sq. Select Area per person. for Values. is specified. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy.Audio Visual. For Latent. select Actual. both. verify that <Building> is specified. click Edit. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. Under Power.

21 Click OK. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. select 219 Library. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. and a loads report displays.Space Plan. space. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. or zone information. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . weather. You should correct the space error in the building model. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. space. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 16 After you review the loads report. 17 In the loads report. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. or make any changes to the model. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. select 219 Library. There should be no warnings displayed. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building.11°C. and zone information for the building model. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 19 In the drawing area. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Calculate. under Energy Analysis. In this exercise. and under Heating Information. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 15 Review the loads report for project. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. click Information). and can be modified here. and click OK. Notice that the space information was automatically updated.

Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m.rvt. click to the right of the building to place the legend.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. in relatively small increments. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. 3 In the drawing area. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 5 Zoom in to the legend. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. Click OK. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Color Scheme. select HVAC Zones.

select Cooling Load . under Schemes. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select the color scheme legend. The new scheme displays in the view. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. and click OK.Expanded Ranges. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. 11 Using the method learned previously. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In the next exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.rvt.

enter Space Airflow Schedule. Click OK. enter . Select Schedule building components. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select New Construction. and then click . Under Available fields.Space Fill is the active view. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Phase. Select Formula. for Formula. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. select HVAC. For Discipline. and click OK. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. In the Fields dialog. For Formula. select Air Flow. enter Airflow Delta. In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Select available fields from. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. For Type. more category options are available. For Name. click (Browse). select Spaces. Click OK. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. ■ Click Calculated Value. In the Calculated Value dialog. select Spaces. select Calculated Supply Airflow.

You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Level. and then select Hidden field. Under Conditions to Use. select Level. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. select Number. right-click to access schedule properties. For Value. Header. In the Color dialog. select Not Between. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. a view opens that contains the selected space. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and click OK. For Fields. and then click Conditional Format. select Airflow Delta. verify that Show is highlighted. Click OK twice. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Background Color. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. click the color swatch. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. For Then by. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. Select Ascending. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. and Blank line. select red. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . ■ The schedule displays.

In the next lesson. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In later exercises. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In this exercise.

and work with the airflow schedule. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you modify air terminal parameters. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. After system creation. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. After completing the air systems lesson. As you place the air terminals. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. Then. In this lesson. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you will create supply air systems. 79 .

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space using the cursor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . the space crossing lines display. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. and scroll to space 223. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.rvt. click Training Files. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 In the ceiling view. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 .

verify that Constrain is cleared. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . and select M_Supply Diffuser . the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and press Enter. as shown. select the diffuser. the hosted elements are updated as well. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. for Flow.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. which in this case is the ceiling grid. click Place on Face. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 17 Move the cursor down. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 9 On the Placement panel. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. If the host element is modified or moved. type 3600. and press Enter. and then press Esc to end the command. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. enter 215 L/s. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Also.

Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. as shown.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then press Esc. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 22 In the drawing area. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Next. 24 In the Open dialog. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select one of the diffusers. As you place the return diffusers. clear Leader. 25 In the drawing area. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. click Yes. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. 28 On the Placement tab. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . click Place on Face. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down.rfa. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and click Open. 29 Place 2 diffusers.

as shown. under Other. 31 In the alert dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . for Reference. 32 In the Project Browser. select one of the return diffusers. Level. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. and click to select the lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. select Strong Reference. click Yes. and click OK.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. select the vertical grid line as shown. 43 Using the same method. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. align the other return diffuser. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. as shown. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 40 In the drawing area. and then press Esc twice.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left.44 While pressing Ctrl. and click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. and on the Options Bar. select both return diffusers. for Flow. and press Enter. As you place the air terminals. 47 Using the same method. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. under Mechanical. enter 310 L/s. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click. and click Element Properties. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. clear LeftArrow.

2 On the View Control Bar. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 8 In the Type Selector. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 10 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Scale. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click 1 : 100. select M_Supply Diffuser . 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. the space crossing lines display.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view.rvt.200 Neck. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. and double-click Level 1 .Design to make it the active view. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. at the lower left corner of the building. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 9 On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan . expand HVAC .

and then press Enter. under Constraints. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . type 6000. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. By copying the diffuser. 15 Press Esc. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. Also.Airflow. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. As a result.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. for Offset. move the cursor down. enter 170 L/s. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. enter 2400. for Flow. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. Click OK. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 11 Select the diffuser. Under Mechanical . If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used.

18 On the Options Bar. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right.16 Using the same method. clear Leader. and then press Esc.

and Flow. 25 Click OK 3 times. 26 Using the method learned previously. 29 Using the same method. select Air Terminals. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. type. it is a negative value. Type. and then right-click in the schedule. and click View Properties. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and press Enter. click Edit. select Mark. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. for Flow. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under space 115. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. select 21. under Other. tile the windows. for Sort by. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. Mark. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Next. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. enter 210 L/s. under Available Fields. mark. double-click System Type. 27 In the schedule. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. for Embedded Schedule. For Category.

HVAC Plan .The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. As you highlight the zone. and maximize Level 1 . 31 In the drawing area. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.Design. as shown.

33 Click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.3 times the heating load). 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.43 W (approximately 1. and under Energy Analysis. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. 36 In the drawing area. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 35 In the Type Selector. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. select M_WSHP .Horizontal . 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.7-18 kW . verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.High Efficiency .

they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. enter . and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. right-click the title. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. However. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. including energy analysis. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . for Constraints ➤ Offset. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. When you highlight a space. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. You then create the logical connection between the system components. After creating the logical connection. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. the space crossing lines display. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. and click OK.HVAC Plan . you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. click Training Files. In this exercise. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 44 Zoom in to space 115. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and click View ➤ Systems. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 Keep the System Browser open. As you add diffusers to systems. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223.

access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 12 In the System Browser. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 11 In the drawing area. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 17 Using the method learned previously. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. and the system connects them. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 18 Click OK. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. On the Options Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. System Name. and Flow value. the number of elements is updated. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. the air terminals are the children. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. review the Number of Elements. Connect Into. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 15 Click Cancel.

In this exercise. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Mark. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 22 Click OK. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. for System Name. under Mechanical. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. under Identity Data. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. which updates the name in the System Browser. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. click Training Files.Rename the system Next. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click Finish Editing System. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. In this exercise. 25 Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the drawing area. 7 On the Options Bar. for Solution Type. select Network. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). In this case. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. For Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Duct Type. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. click Settings. Select Branch. For Offset.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. enter 3000. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select the upper left diffuser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . enter 3000. Also. For Offset. indicating that it’s the active view. the Network type provides several solutions. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. which provides various layout tools. A Generate Layout tab displays. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .Round. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. and display solution 1. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . When you highlight a space using the cursor.HVAC Plan.Design is highlighted. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. the space crossing lines display. For Flex Duct Type.

as shown. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. you’ll get an error in a later step. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. 11 Click Finish Layout. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. as is the elbow itself. or offset elevations are incorrect. enter 900. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. Either relocate the system components. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. click Modify. Click OK. For example. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or manually modify the duct. select a different layout solution. 9 On the Generate Layout panel.

Flow. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. The first time you press Tab. select Duct Color Fill . Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and equipment. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. thus it is not part of the system. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. and click to select it. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. fittings. If the entire network does not highlight. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 .NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Using a flow-based color scheme. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Usually. a disconnection exists. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. highlight a segment of the main duct. and click OK. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. for Color Scheme. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.

and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and on the Options Bar. select the WSHP. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. for Values Displayed. under Graphics. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Mechanical . Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and click OK. 20 In the drawing area. select By View.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.Airflow. but not all values are used in this view. select one of the diffusers in the system. and then click OK. and press Enter. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Flow.

22 Close the Instance Properties dialog.Velocity. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Select Restrict Height. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). for Schemes. select the color scheme legend. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Under Constraints. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. click Cancel. select Friction. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Select Only. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Click OK. and then click to select it. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and select 400.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. for Branch Sizing. 26 Click OK. and enter . Select the upper segment of main duct. and drag it to the right.65 Pa/m. select Calculated Size Only. highlight a segment of the duct. select Duct Color Fill . If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings.

Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and pressure loss. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection).The ductwork and fittings are updated. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Using this tool. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. pressure. Use the information that displays (flow. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). static pressure. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system.

35 Click Finish. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. also known as the critical path. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 .NOTE As you inspect a system.

2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. indicating that it’s the active view. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .HVAC Plan . and select the WSHP. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and click Draw Duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. double-click MEP . and click Draw Duct. Front. right-click the connector grip. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. for Offset.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 14 In the Project Browser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 15 On the ViewCube. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. NOTE When drawing duct. click the corner where the Top. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 3000. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. select the top right diffuser.3D MEP.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 11 On the Options Bar.

104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . in space 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. it is considered a closed loop.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). The ductwork is automatically created. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into.

Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser.22 Using the same method. You can ignore the warning. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. 25 Press Esc. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.

27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. and then click Modify. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 30 Press Esc twice. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.

verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. such as a plenum. under Constraints. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. 40 Using the same method. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). under Mechanical . and click to select it. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.Airflow. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. clear Restrict Height. select a segment of the main duct. and then click OK. for Flow.

108 .

additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Then. In this lesson. 109 . on level 3 of the building model. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. including 2 base mounted pumps. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Create return and supply piping systems. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing.

HVAC Plan . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m.Horizontal High Efficiency .rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Design is highlighted. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Left Return .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select M_WSHP . in corridor 328. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.7-18kW . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . click the top edge of the WSHP.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that Wall faces is selected. 10 Select the WSHP. as shown. 8 Click the corridor wall face. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 7 On the Options Bar. click the dimension. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. and click to place the dimension. and enter 600. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.

and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl.11 Press Enter and then press Esc.) 14 Click Modify. select the 2 WSHPs. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. as shown. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and in the Type Selector.

Under Mechanical. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 0. Click OK. and click to place it in the mechanical room.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. as shown. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. for Water Flow. enter 2750. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 21 Click Modify.75 L/s. for Offset.

including flow and pressure. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler.22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. but without a corresponding system. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. You can create pipes to connect system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Unlike logical connections (systems). This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. analyses cannot be performed. you create the return and supply piping systems. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create the logical connection between the system components.

In the System Browser.rvt. click Training Files. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and click View ➤ Piping. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . This display indicates that the system is selected.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. where it is easier to review the information.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click the Systems column heading. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Piping System | 115 . all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. select the 2 WSHPs. Therefore. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Assigning a system component to an existing system.Mech 330). while pressing Ctrl. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. As you assign equipment to systems. 5 In the System Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system.

Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. You have created the hydronic return system. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. select the boiler. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 17 On the Options Bar. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. for System Name. for System Name. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that on the Options Bar.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and the Edit System tool is not active. 12 In the drawing area.

Design. Creating a Piping System | 117 . under Design ➤ HVAC . 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and click OK. In cooling mode.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In heating mode. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 23 Close the roof plan view.HVAC Plan . The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 25 Select the boiler. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof . and bypasses the cooling tower. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. and select the cooling tower.

expand Piping. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. you can view several parameters. indicating the logical connection.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click Properties. enter 0. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. and click Select. including the flow rate and size of the component. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click Column Settings. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click OK. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). and click Expand All. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 28 Using the same method. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 32 In the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. for Water Flow. 29 Right-click CHWS. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading.8. expand the Hydronic Return system category. under Mechanical. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. In the System Browser.

and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). you can place the cursor over a system component. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. click Check None. click Training Files. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. and click to select it. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 In the Filter dialog. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. then the Select a System dialog displays. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.Design is highlighted. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. press Tab to highlight the system. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. select Mechanical Equipment. the boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC Plan . Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and click OK. A system preview displays in red. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Mech 330). When you draw a box to select components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 13 Click Cancel. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. structural beams. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. It does not reference the architecture. or architectural components. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 10 Click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that Solutions is selected. enter 450.9 In the Select a System dialog. select CHWR. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. click Settings. For Inset. duct. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 11 On the Options Bar. select Perimeter.

select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. 17 Optionally. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . Verify the flow In a previous exercise. 19 In the drawing area. to display the path with thinner lines. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. the flow for each WSHP is 0. With each Tab.16 Click Finish Layout. and press Tab 3 times.75 L/s. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects.

The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.50 L/s. 22 Select the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. 23 Under Mechanical. and access its instance properties.75 L/s). 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . notice that the Water Flow is 1. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. verify that the value for Flow is 1. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Press Esc. and click OK. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. under Mechanical.50 L/s.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.

29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 27 On the System Tools panel.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 32 Click Finish Editing System. On the Options Bar. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. click Edit System. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.Design. double-click Level 1 . the Number of Elements is now 8. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. Logically. 28 In the Project Browser. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.HVAC Plan .

under Mechanical. you physically close the CHWR loop.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.50 L/s. as shown. and click Cancel. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. which propagates flow throughout the system. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. note that the value for Flow is 4. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.94 L/s. access its instance properties. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4.94 L/s. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. Next. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 35 Using the drag control. 38 Using the same method. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. so the total flow of 6.44 L/s.

■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 450. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). enter 0. and then click OK. 40 In the Select a System dialog. 41 Click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select a WSHP.00%. Click Settings. select Perimeter 1 of 5. select CHWS. For Slope.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. For Inset. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 46 Click Modify. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. In a later exercise. 48 While pressing Ctrl. 47 In the drawing area. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. (Both sections are at the same elevation. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. as shown.

and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Either relocate the system components. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). select a different layout solution. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or offset elevations are incorrect. To create the piping system. 50 Using the same method. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. as shown. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). or manually modify the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 51 Click Finish Layout.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. and the return pipes are magenta. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. double-click 3D Building.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ 3D Views. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.HVAC Plan . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. As you work in the training file.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . as shown. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. click Training Files. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

6 Press Delete. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . as shown. select the section of piping. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 7 In the plan view.

Click to specify the reference point. and press Esc to clear the selection. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 9 In the 3D view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Click to move the piping.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the boiler.

An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. 13 In the plan view. select the return pipe riser. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. The connections are automatically created. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. and click Draw Pipe.11 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. select the boiler. and the lower one is secondary. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 12 In the 3D view.

132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor down. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and press Enter. enter 600. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and you select 1 connector. enter 381. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset.In a plan view.

select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. select the primary base mounted pump.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 19 In the plan view. As you place piping runs that are close together. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and the appropriate fittings are created. and click OK. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 18 Press Esc twice.

right-click the bottom connector. and click to draw the pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and select it.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. you select the tee fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click Draw Pipe. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.

27 Move the cursor to the right. and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . click to connect to the pump.

29 If necessary. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.28 Press Esc. right-click the discharge connector. and click to create the pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Offset. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump. enter 1200.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically.33 Press Esc.

right-click the bottom control on the tee. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously. as shown. and click Draw Pipe.

enter 2850.■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press Enter. type 300. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and click to create the pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. for Offset.

You now have a closed loop system. Next. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .37 Click Modify. you validate the flow through the system.

and click OK.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. right-click. the value is 0 L/s. under Mechanical. 46 Press Esc. notice that Flow is 6. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . as shown. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements.44 L/s. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . right-click. view the properties for the secondary pump. 44 In the 3D view. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 42 Click OK. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. notice that under Mechanical.50 or 50% of the Flow. which is rounded up to 3. 48 In the plan view.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. and click Element Properties. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 43 Press Esc. Connect the cooling tower Next. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. for Cooling Water Flow. and click Element Properties. 41 Using the same method. When you create the pumps in parallel. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%.44 L/s). In the Instance Properties dialog. select the cooling tower. 40 Click Cancel.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. select the cooling tower. 49 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.44 L/s. and close the dialog. 50 In the 3D View.

indicating that it’s the active view. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.rvt. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and is heated by the boiler. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. When the valve is open. Adding Valves In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .52 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 8 Press Esc twice. and select M_Ball Valve . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. Adding Valves | 145 .4 On the Options Bar. The bypass valve is closed by default. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.

12 Select M_Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 14 Using the same method. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.10 Press Esc. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. place another M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.

Adding Valves | 147 . and click OK. under Mechanical. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). 19 Using the same method. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s.44 L/s. and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow is 6. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. right-click.

validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.44 L/s.rvt. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 20 Select the bypass valve. In heating mode.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.44 L/s. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. and select M_Ball Valve . The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and select M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Using the method you just learned. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. click Training Files. Initially. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. validate that the Flow is 6.

This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Pipe Color Fill . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . for Schemes. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK.Design is highlighted.Size. Sizing Pipe | 149 .Flow. and click OK. select Pipe Color Fill . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. indicating that it’s the active view. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. as shown.HVAC Plan . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.

or manually modify the pipe. and click to select the branch. Either relocate the system components. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 13 Press Esc. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Click OK. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. enter 1. and for Velocity. select a different layout solution. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Friction. Select And. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and enter 220 Pa/m. Under Constraints. for Branch Sizing.5 m/s. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. or offset elevations are incorrect.

click Training Files. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspecting the System | 151 . 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Inspecting the System In this exercise. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.rvt. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. pressure. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 3D Building.

NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. as required. and pressure information including pressure loss. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. This information helps you modify the system design. flow. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. as shown. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. An inspection flag reports the section number.

10 Click Finish. the Static Pressure is 41916. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. and double-click Level 3 . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. click Training Files.7. you need to validate them. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .1 Pa. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.Design ➤ Floor Plans.4 Pa. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Fluid Temperature. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.0 L/s.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125.Note that the Flow is 1. targeting those systems that need attention. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 9 Using the same method. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. select 32° C.rvt. inspect Section 6 again. and click OK. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and to size pipe. Warnings display.

right-click Hydronic Return. In the System Browser. For example. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. and click Expand All. and click View. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. 4 In the System Browser. and click Show to view all of the system components. After you assign components to a system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 7 In the System Browser. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. If you place components without assigning them to a system.HVAC Plan . you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. TIP If you have multiple views open. 9 Right-click CHWS. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. double-click Level 1 . This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). the pipe is associated with that system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. right-click the Systems titlebar. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.Design ➤ Floor Plans. After you have assigned all components to systems. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. otherwise. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). and select Level 3 . The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. thus assigning the components to a system. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. and confirm unassigned system components. and for pipe sizing. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 6 In the Project Browser. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . As you learned when placing components. click Close. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system.HVAC Plan . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.Design.Design floor plan. 12 In the System Browser. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 10 Using the same methods. expand the Unassigned folder.

You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . 14 Using the methods that you learned.13 Right-click CHWR. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.

156 .

157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

158 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

For Factor. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. enter 70.Wire Sizes. Click OK. click Training Files. You also add a wiring type. select Copper.04. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. click (Open). select Copper. select Wiring Types. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. select 90. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. In this exercise you review electrical settings. For Material. For Temperature. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ Click New Correction Factor. distribution systems. wiring. and demand factors that are applied in the design. speeding up the design phase. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. ■ ■ For Material. Select Correction Factor. enter 1. As you place components and create circuits. expand Wiring . enter THHN.rvt. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems.

For Max Size. For Maximum. select Demand Factors. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select Single.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. For L-G Voltage. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. enter 2000. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. For Conduit Type. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . Click OK. enter 240. enter 220. select 3. select Hot Conductor Size.0. By specifying a range. enter 50. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. select Distribution Systems. select 10000 VA. For L-L Voltage. For Minimum. For Neutral Size. Click Split. Select Neutral Required. select Steel. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. For Value. Under More Than. enter 250. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select THHN. For Wires. enter 1. select Power. For Neutral Multiplier. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. select Voltage Definitions. select 240. For Insulation. enter 120/240. enter 240. select 120. select 75. For Phase.

3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. click Add. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Verify that Instance is selected. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces.rvt. and conference rooms. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Illuminance. In this case the key style is the type of space and.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Under Categories. For Discipline. under the Electrical . and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. enter Required Lighting Level.Lighting group in the space element properties. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. because the key is linked to your new project parameter.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels.Lighting. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Click OK twice. Later in the tutorial. select Electrical . Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. click Training Files. 5 In the drawing area. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). select Electrical. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. restrooms. For Type of Parameter. click (Open). For Group Parameter Under. such as offices. select Spaces.Lighting Plan. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. and double-click Level 2 .

9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category.Lighting. For Name. and click OK. under Electrical . Select Schedule Keys. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. select Spaces. and for Key Name. under Available Fields. enter Space Lighting Requirements. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 .6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. enter Lighting Levels. double-click Required Lighting Level. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. enter Open Office. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. enter 485. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows.

Select Blank Line.Lighting Plan. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. select Required Lighting Level. change the sort order back to the default setting. for Sorting/Grouping. 22 Using the same method. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. which is mapped to project units. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 21 Click OK twice. click Edit. Notice that as you enter the data. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

that Required Lighting Level is blank. the value input applies only to the selected space. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. under Identity Data. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. for Lighting Levels. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. click (Open). The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. In this exercise. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . select Instruction-Standard. Later in this exercise. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. 27 Click OK. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

for Title. For example. and in the At Least column. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. click (Add Value) again. Select the scheme for At Least 20.rvt. for Name. for Category. and press Enter. ■ Click OK. enter 800. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. enter 200. select Required Lighting Level. 00 lx still selected. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. enter Required Lighting Levels. enter 900. Select the scheme for 500 lx. and click OK to dismiss the alert message.00.00. enter Required Lighting and click OK.00 lx. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. and click (Add Value). Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. click (Duplicate). ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. click Training Files.00 lx. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. For Color. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. then the new value will be 400 lx. Select the scheme for 450. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes.00 lx. select Spaces. verify the By Range is selected. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. and click (Add Value) five times. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. Under Schemes. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .

for Available Fields.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Discipline. For Color Scheme. Average Estimated Illumination. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Name. and double-click Level 2 . Level.Lighting CF. Click OK. double-click Number. select Required Lighting.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. and Required Lighting Level. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. Name. select Spaces. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . select Spaces. For Type. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select Illuminance. 13 Click Calculated Value. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 8 In the drawing area. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. enter Lighting Delta. select Electrical.

■ ■ In the Fields dialog. Click OK three times. select Lighting Delta. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. select Average Estimated Illumination. Select Blank Line. Click Background Color. and click Browse. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. for Fields. For Value. select Required Lighting Level. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. for Formula. Click OK. Click OK twice. select Not Between. click Browse. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click Conditional Format. type a hyphen. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. under Condition. Select Header. select Level. for Custom Colors. for Test. select Red.■ For Formula. for Sort by. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. On the Formatting tab. press the spacebar.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Create power loads.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Then. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Use the System Browser to check your design. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Create a panel schedule. First. as you place lighting fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. 171 . you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. power circuits. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits.

In the Color dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. Under Scheme Definition. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. for the Spaces Category. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. 7 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.rvt. click (Open). You can create additional color schemes. for Basic Colors.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Lighting CF view is open. select Orange. By using orange as the color for this range. select Average Estimated Illumination. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Ceiling plan. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . select the color legend. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area.

which is the lowest value in the specified range. zoom to space Library 219. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 13 Click the Level 2 .

the fixtures will move accordingly. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 20 Select the lighting fixture. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.277V. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 19 Press ESC to end the command. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 18 Click to place the fixture.the +/.5 fc range is satisfied.5 fc range. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

■ Under Electrical Loads. enter 162. for Apparent Load. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . scroll to view space space Library 219. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. In the Name dialog. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Name enter and click OK.00 VA.

10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Placing Switches. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. and Receptacles | 183 . specify 15000. Junction Boxes. for Ballast Loss Factor. Junction Boxes. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Placing Switches. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter . click Training Files. Under Photometrics. click (Open). select the top center fixture. select T5 [HO]. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Click OK. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. click the value for Initial Intensity. junction boxes. enter F15.85. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Under Electrical. In the Select File dialog. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. and click OK. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and receptacles to your design. 2 In the drawing area. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. ■ Click Apply. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 9 In space Library 219. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ Click OK twice.ies and click Open. for Color Preset. you add switches. for Lamp. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. ■ Under Photometrics. select 463T5_S.00 lm.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation.rvt. select Xenon and click OK. for Type Mark. enter . Under Photometrics. click the value for Initial Color. In the next exercise.93. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Under Photometrics. select Luminous Flux.

4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.277V. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 7 Click to place the switch.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .

browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Placing Switches. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Select M_Junction Boxes . Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 185 . 9 Press ESC to end the command. The element type M_Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.rfa and click Open.NoLoad. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector.

16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE When entering values. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . In the Type Properties dialog. enter 2750. 15 Select the junction box. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. note the Number of Poles is 1. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.14 Press ESC to end the command. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. for Level 2 .Offset. 21 In the drawing area. Click Edit Type. Under Electrical. enter JB-1NL. zoom to space Library 219.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click OK twice. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. for Mark.

Space Number. 24 For any column. right-click and click Column Settings. Expand General. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Distribution System. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Select Load. 26 In the System Browser. Click OK. Select Size. Placing Switches. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Space Name.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . Expand Electrical. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. 23 In the System Browser. and Number of Elements. NOTE If necessary. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Junction Boxes. and Voltage. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219.

33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 31 Close the System Browser. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.

Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 38 Select the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. move the cursor along the wall. Junction Boxes. 40 On the Options Bar. Placing Switches. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Copy and Multiple.

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 43 Press ESC to end the command.42 Move the cursor down. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Junction Boxes.

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .48 Close the file with or without saving it. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

2 In the drawing area. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. click Training Files.rvt. Adding wiring to a project is optional.equipment. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click (Open). and work toward the higher voltage.208V MCB . You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.Surface: 100A. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom to the space Electrical 220.

194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter LP-2B. For Panel Name. enter 20. select 120/208 Wye. #1 Pole Breakers. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. For Panel Name. enter PP-2B. 14 Select the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Loads. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.480V MCB . for Max. 7 Press ESC to end the command. for Distribution System. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. enter 20. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads. 8 Select the panelboard. for Max. Click OK. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. #1 Pole Breakers.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. for Distribution System. select 480/277 Wye. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.

21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. and for Category. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Filter dialog. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. click Check None. Click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. which is the logical connection between the elements. 20 In the drawing area. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. zoom to space Instruction 221.

196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

33 Select the switch on the right. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 32 Press ESC. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.35 Select the left three-way switch. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and create permanent wiring. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter 2. except without wire.Loads. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .39 Using the same method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. click Check None. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. and for Category. 42 In the Filter dialog. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click Training Files. Click OK. for Hot Conductors. 2 In the drawing area. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Next you create circuits without showing wire. click (Open). add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. Click OK. select Wires.

9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and then expand circuit 1. Expand Electrical. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. and verify that Load. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Click OK. 13 In the System Browser. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. expand Power. Rating. Voltage. Distribution System. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. and Voltage Drop are selected. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.

22 With the junction box still selected. change the Voltage to 277V. under Electrical. Click OK. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Click Tags. 30 Close the System Browser. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader.

34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. click below the first one to place it. for Type Mark.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 47 In the drawing area. enter FR4. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 40 Click OK twice. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Click Yes. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. For Circuit Number. click Edit Type. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. under Identity Data. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. select Break. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 35 Press ESC to end the command. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 .

enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222.rvt. click Training Files. 54 Select all of the tags. click (Open). and click Apply. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Next you create a switch system. and for Category. 52 In the Save As dialog. click Check None. Click OK.rfa. enter a comma. for File Name. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Click OK. Click Save. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 57 In the Filter dialog. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m.

Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Click OK. for Switch ID. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. enter a. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical Lighting. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.

17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. under Electrical . for switch ID.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures.Lighting. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Click OK. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. enter b.

enter 2. for Hot Conductors. and data systems. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Circuits are used for power. under Electrical . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. lighting. select Electrical Fixtures. click Check None. click Training Files. Click OK. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space.26 Close the file with or without saving it. and for Category. click (Open). 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select the PP-2B panel.Loads. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In space Electrical 220.rvt. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 4 In the Filter dialog. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 2 In the drawing area. and click Element Properties. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Creating Power Loads | 207 . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.

18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.13 Select the wire again. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and click to select the circuit. select Wiring.rfa. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and in the drawing area. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. and in the right pane. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 19 Click OK. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.

in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select the PP-2B panel. 22 In space Electrical 220. 26 Press Delete. click the connector of the first receptacle. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 28 In the drawing area. Creating Power Loads | 209 .21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 29 In space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221.

31 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you balance the loads for your design. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Scroll down. zoom to space Electrical 220. select panel LP-2B. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. enter 30A. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 1-#12. Had there been a greater imbalance. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. click Training Files. After re-balancing loads. click Open. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 1-#10. 6 Click OK. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Finally. the distribution is shifted. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. 3 In the Electrical space. 1-#10. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Click OK. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.rvt. Under Electrical-Loads. 1-#12. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 2 In the drawing area. for Rating. click Rebalance Loads.

12 Select panel PP-2B. 14 Close the warning dialog. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. for Rating. and click Finish Editing Circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 Close the warning dialog. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. for Rating. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 24 Click Select Panel. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected.Loads. select the transformer TP-2B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 15 Select panel PP-2B. under Electrical . Next you create a panel schedule. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. enter 40A. enter 25A. under Electrical .Loads. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and click OK. and click OK. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.

select Bold and Italic. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. The Panel Schedule Report displays. 4 Close the report.Panel Schedules. for Appearance. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. enter 5 mm. 5 In the Project Browser. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Font Size. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Header Text. Under Header Text. and open E601 . click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. for Font. select Berlin Sans FB. under Other. expand Sheets (all). Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.rvt. enter 4 mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Select PP-2B. 10 Click OK twice. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. for Font Size. Under Body Text. Click OK. click Training Files. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. click (Open). the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. click Edit.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. press TAB once. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. click (Open). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. Expand Unassigned. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. click Training Files. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select space Lounge 212. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. each with a load of 180VA. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. In the System Browser. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.rvt. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

17 In the drawing area. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. In the System Browser. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. select MDP-1. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 16 Close the details dialog. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. for Panel. 20 On the Options Bar. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 15 In the dialog. under Warnings. Checking Your Design | 215 . Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. zoom to space Electrical 214. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

216 .

217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

click Duplicate. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Sanitary. and click Properties.Plumbing Plan . type PVC . and click OK. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. 219 . you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. you create a PVC pipe type. in addition to loading existing families. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.rvt.Vent. right-click PVC .Design is open. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. In this exercise. and verify that Level 1 .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. planning is critical to a successful design. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. 4 In the Name dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding a pipe size. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In this lesson.

Cross. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select M_Tee Sanitary .PVC . Tee. under Pipe Types. 6 Click OK. 17 In the left pane. select Tee. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. select Branch. 13 In the right panel. In the Project Browser. 21 In the right pane. For Offset. 18 For System Type. select Sanitary. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.PVC . 22 Click New Size. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 10 On the Selection panel. Tap. 27 For the new pipe size. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. PVC . Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. click Training Files. and click Main. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. select None.DWV: Standard.293 mm. click Modify.5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Plastic. 26 Click OK. enter 45. enter 46. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.006 mm. enter 54. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. for Nominal.DWV.PVC .Sch 40 . enter 10°. under Mechanical. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . enter -1250.DWV: Standard. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Vent is listed. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.000 mm. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 15 For System Type. 24 For Inside Diameter.Sch 40 . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . click Pipe Settings. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. and click OK. 25 For Outside.rfa. for Material.Sch 40 . and open Metric\M_Trap P . Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select Sanitary. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.

and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. sanitary piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the cold water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and hot and cold water piping. Create the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures. 221 . add a hot water heater. vent. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

select one of the components in the system. select Sanitary 107. and click OK. at the midpoint of the detail lines. as shown. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. a toilet. 16 In the Select a System dialog. A preview of the piping layout displays. for example. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base is placed.

it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Slope. 25 In the left pane. select 100 mm. select Intersections. You accept this suggested solution. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Solution Type.19 On the Options Bar. 21 On Options Bar.Sanitary. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. select PVC . enter -350 mm. enter 1. enter -350 mm. for Diameter. and click OK. 23 For Pipe Type. select PVC . 28 On the Options Bar. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. and for Offset. select Branch. 30 Click Modify. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 26 For Pipe Type. 27 For Offset.05%. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select Main. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 24 For Offset. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. and modify it to meet project requirements. 29 On the Options Bar. click Solutions. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout.Sanitary. The default settings are automatically modified. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and click Settings. enter -1225.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl.

35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 34 Click Modify.33 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .36 Using the previous method. 37 On the Generate Layout panel. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing .Overall.

you continue with the work from the last exercise. and check the slope control. as shown. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .

in the Type Selector. under M_Lavatory .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select 560 mmx560 mm . 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Design is open. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 4 On the Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. as shown.Rectangular.Public. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 5 On the Placement panel.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 .

9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . On the Options Bar. enter 711.2. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. and press Enter to create a second sink.7 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 8 Select the sink. select Multiple.

12 In the drawing area. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. enter 711. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 15 Click the 3 sinks. Press Esc. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 In the System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. click Add To System. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.2. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. and press Enter to create the third sink.

In the System Browser. under Design ➤ Plumbing . notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 19 In the 3D view.Design ➤ 3D Views. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. double-click 3D Plumbing . as shown.Overall. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . use the ViewCube to orient the view. 21 Select the tee. 20 Select the fitting. click Finish Editing System.16 On the Edit System panel. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.

right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). press Spacebar. 26 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe.22 In the plan view. enter 1. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 27 Click Modify. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. enter 760 mm. and click to draw the pipe. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. 24 On the Options Bar.05%. with the tee fitting selected. for Slope. and click Apply. When you press the Spacebar.

click to place the fitting. and when the vertical center line displays. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 31 Click Modify.PVC . move the cursor over the stub pipe. 29 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 . under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . select Standard.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 30 In the 3D view.DWV. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 32 Select the double wye fitting.

242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you add pipe segments to the double wye. and press Enter.33 With the fitting selected. enter 305 mm. In the next steps. 34 Press Esc. on the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. 37 Select the fitting. for Offset. 36 In the section view. enter 150 mm. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. right-click the right connector. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. double-click the section head to open the section view. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option.

40 Click Modify. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 41 Using the same method. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 42 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .

244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Esc. press Spacebar. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. 46 In the section view. 49 Using the same method. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. right-click the bottom connector. 47 Move the cursor down. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and click Draw Pipe. 48 Click Modify. enter 150 mm.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.

You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 53 Using the same method. 52 In the plan view. under M_Trap P . 55 In the 3D view. select Standard.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select the P-Trap on the left. 56 Using the same method. 51 In the Type Selector. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.DWV. 54 Click Modify. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.Sch 40 . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.PVC .

connect the right sink to the double wye. enter 150 mm. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. and press Enter. select the left P-Trap. Select the double wye pipe on the left.. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. In the plan view. Click Modify. 58 Using the same method. Click in the plan view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Move the cursor to the left.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.

Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. On the Routing Solutions panel. Press Esc. while pressing Ctrl. while pressing Ctrl. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. click Finish to select the recommended solution. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. select PVC Sanitary. select the section of pipe you just drew. In the Type Selector. under Pipe Types. as shown. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 .■ In the 3D view. and select a proposed solution.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you continue with the work on the sanitary system.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. click Training Files. for Slope. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .rvt. and verify the slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that 1.05% is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 62 On the Options Bar. click Finish. adjusting the sanitary stack.

Design. select Standard.PVC . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 10 In the 3D view. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. as shown. right-click the top connector. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Plumbing Plan . select the vertical stack. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 9 In the Type Selector. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . click Modify.Overall. and click to draw the pipe. 7 On the Selection panel. and click Draw Pipe. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Design.Floor level line. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.DWV.Sch 40 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select the elbow fitting on the right. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 3 In the Section view. 5 Select the tee.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

If the tutorial training files are not present. You create a new pipe type. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. However. click Training Files. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. In this lesson. After finishing each exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. and click Duplicate. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 267 .rvt. you can choose to save your work. 2 Right-click Standard. In this tutorial. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. go to http://www. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.autodesk.

and click Properties. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. verify that 2800 is specified. select Fire Protection Wet. duct. for Material. For Pipe Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. For Pipe Type. 9 Click OK. you create project parameters and work with schedules. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. structural beams. verify that 2800 is selected. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. and enter Fire Protection Wet. under Mechanical. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. and then click OK. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. For Offset. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Main. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. click Rename. For System Type. select Fire Protection Wet. 6 In the Project Browser. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In the left pane. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. or architectural components. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . In the next exercise. In this exercise. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. For System Type. For Offset. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). However. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. Next. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Carbon Steel. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.

When you highlight a space using the cursor. enter Zone 1. Under Categories. under Fire Protection. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. the space crossing lines display. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Spaces. click Add. 8 Using a crossing window. 6 In the drawing area. and then click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click Element Properties. indicating that it’s the active view. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. right-click.Fire Protection Piping Plan . select Fire Protection. click Training Files. select the upper half of the building. for Sprinkler Zone. enter Sprinkler Zone. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt.Design is highlighted. 5 Click OK twice. select space Instruction 221 as shown. For Group parameter under. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. for Name.

and then click OK. to which you add various parameters. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. under Fire Protection. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Zone 2. and then access instance properties. including a calculated value parameter. 13 Using the same method. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Sprinkler Zone. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Zone 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.rvt. verify that only Spaces are selected. 10 In the Filter dialog. click Training Files. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. you create schedules for sprinkler design. under Fire Protection. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. double-click on each column separator. 11 Click OK twice. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. select 0 decimal places. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. Click OK. For Rounding. 10 In the Format dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Obstructed-Combustible. For Key name. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. For Unit symbol. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. The schedule displays. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 14 Select the new header. For Type of Parameter. click Add Parameter. select Maximum Spacing. and click Field Format. 6 Using the same method. for Name. enter Light. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Spaces. select mm. enter Protection Area Construction Type. click the Formatting tab. select Fire Protection.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Click OK.Design is highlighted. For Name. select Length. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select Millimeters. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. enter Maximum Spacing. For Group parameter under. For Units. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and on the ribbon. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Select Schedule keys. 7 Click OK. 9 On the Formatting tab.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser.

■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. enter 4575. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Click OK. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. enter 40. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Combustible Extra. 16 Using the same method. and press Enter. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter Sprinkler Schedule. For Name. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. select Spaces. NOTE The units of measure display automatically.

enter Minimum Sprinklers. under Available fields. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. Click OK. click . select Area. For Units. 19 Click the Formatting tab. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. For Discipline. In the Fields dialog. select 0 decimal place. select Fixed. and click Field Format. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Common. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Type. 22 Click OK twice. select Number. select Minimum Sprinklers. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Formula. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Rounding. and click OK. Enter the formula operator / after Area. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list).Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab.

On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. verify that Use default settings is selected. for Sort by. select Number. and click View Properties. ■ In the Format dialog. and then select Hidden field. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Hidden field. select Grand totals. select Sprinkler Zone. Select Header and Blank line. Under Field formatting. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. for Sorting/Grouping. under Other. At the bottom of the dialog. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 26 Click OK 3 times. select Sprinkler Zone. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and then click Field Format. and select Totals only. click Edit. select Level. For Fields. For Fields. For Then by. Select Header and Blank line. For Then by (second instance). select Level.

delete the word Maximum. double-click Type. for Available fields. for Filter. select Grand totals. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. click Edit. 30 Click OK twice. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. click Edit. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. under Other. select Sprinklers. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and click View Properties. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Under Field formatting. for Embedded Schedule. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. for Filter by. and select Totals only. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. select Count.27 In the drawing area. System Name. For Category. On the Formatting tab. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Embedded Schedule. select Calculate totals. select Level equals Level 2. right-click the schedule. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click View Properties. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and Count. for Fields. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers.

47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 50 Access the instance properties. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. but their values are not determined. for Protection Area Construction Type. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed. 48 In the floor plan. 46 With the space still selected. 44 In the schedule. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. double-click FP . This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and access the instance properties. select space 221 Instruction. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. under Identity Data. 43 Click Cancel. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. select Ordinary. select Light. 52 Click OK. select space 221 Instruction. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. Unobstructed. for Protection Area Construction Type. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Unobstructed. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Ordinary. and click OK.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. 41 In the plan view. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog.Fire Protection Plan Design. and the spacing parameter values are evident. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. As a result.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

At the end of this tutorial. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you will understand the process. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. By following the recommended workflow. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. As you place the sprinklers. and double-click Level 2 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.rvt. As you create the system. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you can choose to save your work. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. After finishing each exercise. go to http://www. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. click Training Files. However. 279 . and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. If the tutorial training files are not present. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m.autodesk. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. methodology.

6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When this happens. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. After placing the initial sprinkler. 3 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . When there is a small misalignment. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building.

12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Also.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 Press Esc twice. and 207. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. and click to place 3 sprinklers. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 9 In space Instruction 202. select the sprinklers that you placed. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 11 In the drawing area. 206. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205.

specify a vertical offset. open Design ➤ FP . 18 Type WT. Next.Design. and 200C). you place non-hosted sprinklers. as shown. 200B. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. you place non-hosted sprinklers.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. and then press Esc. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 17 In the Project Browser. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.

19 In the floor plan. Next. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. In this exercise. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 25 Click OK. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 29 Press Esc. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 2900 mm. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. This number is determined in the schedule. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. under Constraints. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 .0. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. For Number. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. and with piping (physical connection). 30 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Enter. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. Notice that the schedule updates. enter 11. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.FP_Ceiling view. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. In the next exercise. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . enter 4100. and click Element Properties. you adjust the offset. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. move the cursor to the right. After creating the logical connection. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click View ➤ Systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. click Training Files. As you assign sprinklers to systems. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. and select Piping. However. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building.Fire Protection Plan . 1 In the Project Browser. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow.rvt. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Design is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. 5 Right-click the header. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building.

You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. In the System Browser. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. named Fire Protection Wet. Next. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 11 With the system still selected. press Tab. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. and select the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. indicating the logical connection. Creating a Piping System | 285 . Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. within the Piping Systems folder. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. select an initial piping layout. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. and click Select.

14 Click Finish Editing System. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 15 In the drawing area. system equipment. select Branch. In the left pane. click Solutions. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and on the Options Bar. select 150 mm. providing system editing tools. as shown. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 23 For Offset. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 22 On the Options Bar. click Place Base. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). verify that Main is selected. For Pipe Type. click Settings. verify that 2800. 19 Click OK.0 is specified. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. for System Name. and a piping layout preview displays. 13 In the System Browser. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. enter -3650.The Edit Piping System panel displays. 12 On the Options Bar. For Offset. and number of elements in the system. When the layout is finished. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for Diameter.Wet is selected.

Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. A (parallel movement control) displays. click Modify. and green represents branch lines). On the Generate Layout panel. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. Creating a Piping System | 287 . The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. and select solution 4. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. In general. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. verify that Network is selected.

The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. or that offset elevations are incorrect. as shown.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. Either relocate the system components. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select a different layout solution. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 29 Click Finish Layout. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 32 If necessary. or manually modify the pipe.

1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 If necessary. and select the elbow fitting as shown. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 2 Zoom in. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. click Training Files. and then you create piping to physically connect them. and various manual pipe creation tools. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.rvt. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. the Connect Into tool. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.33 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Next. indicating that it’s the active view.

IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. and so on) are logically connected by a system. air terminals. 9 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. you can select the pipe or duct. radiators. or a system component to display system tools. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). mechanical equipment. 5 In the drawing area. click Add To System. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. and pipe or duct is created.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 8 In the corridor.

18 Click Finish Editing System. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. 13 Click Finish Layout. for Solution Type. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. verify that Solutions is selected. verify that Network is selected. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . and select solution 5. 14 Close the System Browser. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 20 Open Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection.11 On the Generate Layout panel. 12 On the Options Bar. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 21 In the Piping Plan. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and then tile the views. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.

26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. 28 In the drawing area. right-click. and then press Esc. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 27 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. select 2800. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 25 Select the sprinkler.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.24 In the Piping Plan. for Offset. 29 Using the same method.

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Fire Protection Piping Plan . zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. select 1 : 50. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 .Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 31 In the plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Because the whole system highlights. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. for Scale.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.rvt.Design is highlighted. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. indicating that it’s the active view. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.

294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 8 Right-click. and click View Properties.6 Press Esc.

11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 10 In the Project Browser. 17 Move the cursor up. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Apply Default View Template. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and select Hose Reel Cabinet .Fire Protection Plan . 12 If necessary. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. enter 2135. and click Draw Pipe. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. Under Identity Data. select Design. select FP .Design. 14 Select the tee fitting.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. 13 Select the elbow fitting. right-click Design ➤ FP . 15 Press Spacebar.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. For View Classification. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and then click Modify. enter FP Section_Stair. Click OK.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. drag the top section boundary line up.Design the active view. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . for Sub-Discipline. select MEP Section. and then right-click the top connector. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for View Name. 19 Make Level 2 . and press Enter. 22 In the drawing area. For Default View Template.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.

verify that Automatically Connect is active. 24 Select the cabinet. and click Draw Pipe.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Placement Tools panel.23 In the section view. and then click Modify. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). 26 On the Options Bar. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . zoom to the hose reel cabinet. select . right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . for Diameter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . and then click Modify. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.rfa. verify that M_Gate Valve . 31 In the alert dialog. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet.29 Close the section view. and click Open. as shown. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. 32 In the Open dialog. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm.50 mm is selected. 33 In the Type Selector. click Yes to load a family.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views.Design ➤ 3D Views. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.rvt. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. click Training Files. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.

click Check None. and click OK. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. or height. 7 On the Options Bar. width. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. 6 In the Filter dialog. Changing the diameter. width. select 25mm. or width. 8 Click Modify. 4 In the floor plan view. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. height. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . All selected piping is now 1" diameter. for Diameter. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

and after each segment highlights. NOTE Tags are view specific. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. click to place the tag. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). and click Open. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. Clear Leader. 17 On the View Control Bar. . click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Press Esc.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. select the linked architectural file. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. By hiding the linked file. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.rfa. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 12 If necessary. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. They display only in the view in which they were placed.

The main piping is selected and displays in red. select 100mm. and when the section highlights. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 21 On the Options Bar. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 .19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. press Tab. for Diameter. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment.

24 In the drawing area. The pipe diameter is modified. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. for Diameter. and then tag the piping as shown. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. as shown. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. 26 Using the same method. and maximize the floor plan.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select 40mm. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 25 On the Options Bar. 23 Close the 3D view.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. In this exercise. You added tags to pipes. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. In this tutorial. you created a wet fire protection system. For additional practice. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems.

304 .

create details. add annotations and dimensions.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.

306 .

callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. dependent views. and click Rename. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 307 . and click Properties. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Floor Plans. and click OK. If the view included detail graphics. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and view references.rvt. and apply a view template. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. matchlines. click Training Files. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

3 In the Rename View dialog. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. click Training Files. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. and then press Esc. 4 Using the same method. views and put them on the sheet. and click Rename. more focused. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller.rvt. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. create dependent views for areas B and C. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 10 In the drawing area. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 6 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Close the file without saving. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. as shown. and click OK. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. and click OK. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views.

select black. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 13 Press Esc twice. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. and click OK. select 11.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. For Line Pattern. select Double Dash . For Line Weight. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. In the Color dialog. Click OK. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. click the current value. and then press Esc. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. 19 In the drawing area. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color.

Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .20 Select the upper view reference and. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. as shown. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 25 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. for Target view. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 21 Using the same method. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference.

27 Using the same method. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 4 In the Project Browser. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. right-click 3D Plumbing. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom to each of the view references. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Domestic Water. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. and select the section box. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. enter Plumbing Isometric . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. select Plumbing Isometric.rvt. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and click Properties. For Default View Template. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. for View Name.

8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. Click Apply. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. For Sub-Discipline. and click Apply Default View Template. and click to select it. For Pattern. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. Click OK. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 10 Right-click.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Domestic Water. right-click Plumbing Isometric . select Plumbing. and then click OK. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Dash. The section crop lines no longer display. select 3. 6 In the Project Browser. select Documentation. for View Classification.

and click to select it. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. press Tab 3 times. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . 13 Using the same method.

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 15 Right-click.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click on the Format value. and in the Type Selector. 19 Using methods learned previously. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Sanitary Waste. and in the view properties. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. For Slope. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. select 1.5mm Arial. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. and for Default View Template. specify Plumbing .Isometric. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. verify that Common is selected.16 Press Esc. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing.

click Training Files. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . When the view is associated with a sheet. for Rounding. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. 26 Press Esc twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 22 Click OK twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. select To the nearest 10. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted.■ In the Format dialog.rvt. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. and click to place the spot slope annotation.

for Scale. Creating Callout Views | 317 . select 1 : 50. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 5 On the Options Bar. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.

drag it to the sheet.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. select 5. for Line Weight. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 13 In the Project Browser.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. Click OK. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. double-click M601 . using the same method. and select the viewport. under Sheets (all).

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. For Default View Template. Click OK. enter WSHP PART PLAN. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. for View Name. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Apply Default View Template. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click the callout view.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 17 In the Project Browser. For Title on Sheet.

and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space.

The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click OK. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. Creating Callout Views | 321 . 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Apply View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 26 In the Rename View dialog. right-click the detail view. under Names. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

322 .

work with model-based components. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. click Training Files. as shown. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. symbols. duct tags. linetypes. Creating Annotations In this exercise. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and annotation to create a legend. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 323 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

8 With the text still selected. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 9 Press Esc twice. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). and select 1. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

select a supply diffuser. Creating Annotations | 325 . a return diffuser. and a segment of rectangular duct. and then click Right Straight. as shown. verify that Leader is cleared. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 15 On the Options Bar. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 16 In the drawing area. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a segment of round duct.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element.

rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. If necessary. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 25 In the drawing area. click Load. 20 In the Tags dialog. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click OK. as shown.rfa. for Ducts. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. clear Leader. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 24 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Tags dialog. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.17 Click Modify. 21 In the Load Family dialog. and click Open. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. under Category. you can annotate the element with a second tag type.

31 On the Options Bar. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Creating Annotations | 327 . select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. and Attached End. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. Leader. select Horizontal. and then press Esc. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 32 In the drawing area.26 On the Options Bar.

328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. as shown. 36 Press Esc twice. 34 In the drawing area. for Leader. select Free End. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.33 On the Options Bar.

indicating that it’s the active view. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. click Training Files. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. lay out. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. select the last tag placed. That’s because you changed a type property. not simply an instance property. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Dimensions | 329 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. for Leader Arrowhead.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. you use temporary dimensions to locate. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree.rvt. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 40 Using the method learned previously. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and all elements of that type are affected. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and lock lighting fixtures. 37 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. On the Options Bar. 13 Press Esc. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Click EQ. 14 Using the same method. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. and then select the interior face of the wall. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. select the dimension line. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

17 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 331 . click the 3 interior locks on the line. click Training Files. annotation symbols. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. and offset them from the wall. and notes. enter 2430. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 20 Using the same methods. linework.9). and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. Because the dimensions are locked. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components.rvt. and press Enter. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.

For View. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and select 1. ■ 9 In the drawing area. select 1 : 50. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .200 Neck. Click OK.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. select Floor Plan. enter Diffuser Legend. click below the title to place the diffuser. 10 Using the same method.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 5 Click in the drawing area. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. For Scale. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.

and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 333 . 14 In the drawing area.11 Press Esc. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. click next to the top diffuser.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. and select 1. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 22 Zoom in to the copied component.DROP and its text note. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 24 Select the component’s break line.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 21 Press Esc. The selected detail lines are now thin. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 27 While pressing Ctrl.

Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. and then click Modify. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol.30 Select Spot Elevation . Creating a Legend | 335 .MECHANICAL LEGEND. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 34 Using the method learned previously. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify. enter E. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc. and select Title w Line . 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

Detailing 15 In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog.113 East elevation view. A detail callout that references another view.rvt. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. 337 . A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. detail groups. and text. A drafting view using detail components. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.

you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. Next. 4 On the Options Bar.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . select each of the 2 panelboards. place Power Riser . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. and then modify and align the views. 7 Drag the Power Riser .113 East on the sheet.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 5 In the drawing area.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 8 Using the same method. clear Leader.

13 Right-click. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . 12 Select the Level 1 line. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click Deactivate View. and click Activate View. giving the appearance of a single view. and click OK. for Title on Sheet. under Identity Data. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view.9 Press Esc. select the 113 North view. right-click. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram.

23 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 Using the drag control. 19 Select the Level 1 line. and click Activate View. you add wiring to the diagram. 22 Press Esc. and select Title w Line . 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. In the next exercise. as shown. select the 113 East elevation view. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. right-click.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view.

4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the Line Styles dialog. for Line Weight. and then click OK. enter Electrical Power. as shown. select 6. indicating that it’s the active view. 9 Beginning at the transformer. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Chain is selected. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. for Name. click New. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. Under Modify Subcategories. notice that there are no snaps active. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 2 Close the Project Browser. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. In the New Subcategory dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. and click OK. click Training Files. 8 On the Options Bar. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .rvt.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. expand Lines. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you draw.113 North view.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise.

as shown. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).10 Press Esc. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 11 Using the same method. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 3mm. for Offset.

Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. so that the result is as shown. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool.

22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.

29 Click Modify. and select 1.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 31 While pressing Ctrl. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 28 Click above the cap. select Multiple. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 36 Press Esc.

enter 3. You enter exact values for each line length. 40 Press Esc. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Press Esc. you can ensure that they stay together. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. enter 7. and then press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. change the length of the bottom line to 3. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. for Offset.0. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. and press Enter. enter 12. and press Enter. Using the same method. click on the length dimension value. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 42 On the Options Bar. 39 Move the cursor to the right.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

51 Using the method learned previously. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 50 With the group selected. TP-2B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click OK. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 46 In the Project Browser. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. for Name.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. enter Ground. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 54 Select the group. 47 In the drawing area. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 52 Select the detail group. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. while pressing Ctrl. select all 3 lines. and then press Esc. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. In later exercises. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. and will place it on sheet E01. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Back. and double click Typical Make Up Air. and Left sides converge. click Home. and click Rename. click Training Files. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and then click the corner where the Top. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. for Name. and click OK. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). 5 Right-click the copy. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. and then press Esc. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. 8 On the ViewCube. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Apply View Template. Walkthroughs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing .rvt. 3 Select the section box. select 3D Views. 2 Zoom in to view the section.

Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper).■ ■ Under Names. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Typical. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to specify the second leader point. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. select 3D HVAC Iso. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Click OK. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 15 Using the same method.

24 Access the instance properties for the view. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. as shown. and under Extents. To rotate and reposition a text label. select Crop Region Visible. 19 Complete the text labels. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. and then click OK. 23 Click on the crop region. under Extents. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing .18 Press Esc. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. as shown. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail.

Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and click Deactivate View. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 29 Right click the view. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. scroll down. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Place a detail component. and under Extents. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 30 On the View Control Bar. 32 In the Instance Properties.25 Click OK. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . and click View Properties. 33 Right-click the view. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents.rvt. and click Activate View. clear Crop Region Visible. select Crop View and Section Box. and click OK. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. click Training Files.

Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. For View Classification. Click OK. select Plumbing. right-click the view name. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. as the rectangle start point. as shown. click the point at the top of the drain. select 1 : 5. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. For Scale. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 13 In the drawing area. and click Properties. select Documentation. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 9 Zoom in to the component. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 3 In the Project Browser. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. for Sub-Discipline. 12 On the Element panel.

P.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 18 With the filled region still selected. select C. Concrete. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. and then press Esc. 21 In the drawing area. 22 Click Modify. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 20 Select 1. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.I. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. and click OK. for Type.

click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 34 Press Esc. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. 28 Click Modify. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 23 In the drawing area. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. and then click to select them. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . (Line). select the filled region. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.

39 Select the line between points 1 and 2.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then select the side of the slab above the line. and then press Esc. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 40 Click Finish Region.

Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. and click OK. for Name. 49 Click Modify. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 45 Using the method learned previously. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. select the Flashing Membrane group. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. press Tab to highlight the chain. as shown. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. draw wide detail lines as shown. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing .D. enter Flashing Membrane_F.. (Rectangle).Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. and then click to select them.

and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. press Spacebar twice.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. as shown. as shown. 61 Using the same method. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 55 Press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .

67 On the Options Bar. 64 Press Esc twice. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. as shown. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. select Leader and Free End. and use the grips to resize the masking region. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.62 Press Esc twice.

and then click OK. 72 If necessary. 78 Move the cursor to the left. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. select 15000 (Division 15 . Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 80 Press Esc twice.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 71 Click Modify. and click to specify the second leader point. and click to specify the text insertion point.70 In the Keynotes dialog. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 81 Select the text note. 76 To select the leader start point.

Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .82 Continue annotating the detail.

Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 . and then press Esc twice.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 88 In the drawing area. 90 Press Esc. select the view title. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and click to place it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful